JP2021023390A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve the problem of a uniform performance mode of a game performance and a possibility of decreasing interest in a game in such a conventional game machine that has a plurality of game performances having different execution modes as game performances and show different jackpot reliability depending on a game performance to be executed, and hence increases a player's interest in a game when a game performance having high jackpot reliability is under execution, and further enhances interest in a game in an advantageous jackpot, and is shifted to a predetermined game state or is shifted to a game state more advantageous than the predetermined game state after completion of a jackpot game.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of providing a highly amusing game state is provided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a conventional game machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When the result of the hit / fail judgment is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. There was one that performed a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and there is a possibility that the result of the hit / fail judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. It showed the possibility of doing (big hit reliability) (for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, as a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.), there is a device having a plurality of game effects having different execution modes and showing different jackpot reliability depending on the game effect to be executed. In addition, along with the game production, music corresponding to the game production is output to enhance the taste of the game production. As a result, the player's game interest is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the game interest is further enhanced when the jackpot is advantageous.

JP-A-10-57583

In the game machine as described above, when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, the game entertainment taste is enhanced, but on the other hand, the production mode of the game production is uniform and there is a possibility that the game entertainment taste is deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a game machine capable of executing a game production that enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect according to the variable display of the identification information, and
A sound output means capable of outputting a predetermined game sound in association with the game production,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
The game effect is characterized by having a first specific game effect and a second specific game effect.

According to such a game machine, a game effect accompanied by a predetermined game sound is executed along with the variable display of the identification information. Further, as the game effect, it has a first specific game effect and a second specific game effect. As a result, the player can distinguish the game effect not only by the display mode but also by the magnitude of the sound pressure, increase the variation of the game effect, and provide the game effect with high taste.

According to the game machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that executes a game production that enhances the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process. It is a flowchart of a hit game production process. It is a figure which shows the reach production list. It is a figure which shows the music list in the jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows the notice production type list. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the specific period advance notification effect. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the specific period advance notification effect. It is a figure which shows the reach production list.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching the game ball with a launch intensity according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, a simple "directing button 63") is provided. As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example, an input detecting means in which the player can directly contact the button portion to input the input can be detected. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, the same information is displayed by any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, the configuration is such that it can rotate a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. This is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

On the game board 2, a game area 3 into which the game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by the rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). At the same time, the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the first special symbol is determined and the second special symbol is determined) is low (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball is launched into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the start port (second start port 21 or third start port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the game ball is launched into the left game area 3A (first game area) and entered into the first start opening 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. Has been done. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first winning / failing determination executing means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit doublet (also called "big hit symbol") such as "777". indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the symbol for the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. See and grasp the effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b. Further, as the execution mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc. In addition to 7b, one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used to display the effect. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect using the above-mentioned effect symbol (effect symbol game effect), it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later, and There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol (effect symbol) depending on the game state) is displayed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. (Operates in an operating mode), the movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the first hit / fail judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "normal symbol hit / fail judgment" or "third hit / fail judgment"), the normal symbol starts to change and display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment. Stop display. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / miss determination of whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as a "third hit / miss determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (“big hit”). It is also called "executable state" or "big hit standby state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts and the predetermined jackpot (big hit opening) ( The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entrance) that allows the player to enter the ball at all times, the left-handed game becomes a big hit (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When executed in the game, the game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the accuracy of the first special symbol is determined (first). (1) Special symbol hit / miss determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface like the opening / closing member 32, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is passed through the inclined upper surface passage in any direction (the second major winning opening 35 described later). Induce to.

In this way, in a state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played (right-handed game), the game state (state B: low accuracy high) in which the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol. It has a base state (high accuracy and high base state) and a gaming state (state C: high accuracy and low base state) in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second start opening 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface. In the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second prize opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, in the second large winning device 36 (second variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) general entry ports 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly in which a left-handed player enters the first starting port 20 (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment), the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy, high base state, high accuracy). In the high base state or high accuracy low base state), right-handed to enter the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35. It will be a game aiming at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, first, the big hit standby state is set, and the right-handed game is aimed at entering the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit standby state, the big hit game starts, and the right-handed game mainly aims at entering the first big winning opening 30.

Further, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state (state B), it mainly goes to the gate 28 (normal figure gate) and the second starting port 21. It will be a right-handed game aiming at entering the ball. On the other hand, when the big hit game is completed and the game state after the big hit game is in the high accuracy low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming at entering the third start opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. That is, the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) by right-handed hitting. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail determination) by right-handed hitting. As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of the special symbol winning / failing determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game ball flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 of the right game area 3B. The amount can be adjusted (decreased). That is, the second out port 34b is installed on the upstream side of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b allow the ball entry ports to be opened. The rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (ratio of entry) can be adjusted. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second large winning opening 35, which is a large winning opening for small hits. Is provided. With this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of the game ball into the game area on the side of the second large winning opening 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. It is adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out opening 34c makes it possible to adjust the entry ratio (entry ratio) of the game ball into the second major winning opening 35.

Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 has a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a gaming state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a game ball launch direction, that is, right. A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the player should hit the ball or hit the ball to the left. Further, the main display 40 includes a variable state indicator 49 indicating a variable state (c1) of the first special symbol, a variable state (c2) of the second special symbol, and a variable state (c3) of the normal symbol. There is. The various indicators included in these main indicators 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop is displayed to display the first start port 20 and the second start port. The result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 or the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and / or second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is the 4R first big hit, the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined in a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

As described above, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 41a A plurality of LEDs corresponding to are lit (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is displayed by the jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), Small hit type (1 mode if 1 type) and off type (1 mode if 1 type) are stopped and displayed.

Further, the fluctuation state display 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3), and the display unit c1 indicates the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit. The fluctuating state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display unit c1 indicating the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the first special symbol display 41a. Has been done. Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variable time of the first special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off to stop and display, and in the case of a big hit, all are turned on in red regardless of the big hit type. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c1 is displayed in blinking during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped in the off symbol. Is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c1) functions as a second first special symbol display 41a. Note that "interruption of variable display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time is a big hit, and the variable display is temporarily interrupted. Then, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

Further, the display unit c2 indicating the fluctuation state of the second special symbol is, like the display unit c1, one LED (display unit, display) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display) than the second special symbol display 41b. It is composed of a display unit). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Specifically, if it is off, it will be turned off and stopped, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed in red regardless of the big hit type, and if it is a small hit, it will be turned on in green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Stop display with. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c2 is displayed blinking during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped by the small hit symbol. The inside is lit in green, and the off symbol is turned off (hidden) while it is stopped. Thereby, by looking at the display unit c2 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (changing, interrupting, stopping, hit / fail determination result) of the second special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the second special symbol display 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display 41b.

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c1 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or a "first sub-symbol". Further, since the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or a "second sub symbol". Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Variable display and stop display are displayed. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the first state symbol is turned off (off mode) and stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit, all are lit in red regardless of the big hit type (big hit mode). Stop display with. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is also the same.

Further, the display unit c3 indicating the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is a single LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the normal symbol display 42, similarly to the display unit c1. It is configured. Then, during the variable display of the normal symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, if it is off, it is turned off and stopped, and if it is hit, it is turned on in red regardless of the hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c3 is displayed blinking while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red when the hit symbol is stopped, and is turned off when the off symbol is stopped. (Hidden). As a result, by looking at the display unit c3 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the normal symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type in detail, but the variable state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or a "first sub-normal symbol". In addition, the first state normal symbol displays fluctuation and stop corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is wrong, the light is turned off (the hit mode) and the stop is displayed, and if the hit is the hit type, the red light is turned on (the hit mode).

In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a variable state display 49 are provided, and the variable state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. , When any LED of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs capable of grasping the fluctuation state in detail fails (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in the present embodiment, the display control of both the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and the variable state display 49 is performed by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes of the special symbol and the effect symbol (display result of the variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as the "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit is "small". It is also called "hit mode". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various types of random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are used based on the entry. Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special figure hold (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is stored in the unit 85a and acquired based on the entry into the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). Will be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, the special symbol hit / fail judgment for the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each). It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of.

Then, the number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds 1 to 1 No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”” in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol hit / miss judgment, a normal symbol hit / miss judgment, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as a "game control unit"), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls an effect to be executed as the game progresses, a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case containing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board or the like storage case containing the voice control board 106 (also referred to as “sound output means”), the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and the sub-control board 90 is provided on the image control board or the like storage case. A sub-control board storage case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second The large winning opening sensor 35a and the general entry opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first grand prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first grand prize device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, variable state indicator 49, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and is inserted by the player performing a predetermined ball lending operation (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives and pays out prize balls and pays out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let them control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the same number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, etc. can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, and the fourth effect hold display 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Sound data (game sound) such as sound output from the speaker 67 (also referred to as “sound output means”) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15Rth". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", and "2R 7th big hits". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 2nd big hit", "4R 3rd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. In "2R 6th big hit" and "2R 7th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 2 times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" indicate the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. , Move to the high probability state described later (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to the low probability state described later (the probability variation function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time reduction". Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high accuracy and low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high-accuracy low-base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than that of the low-accuracy low-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy high-base state. It is set. In particular, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

The game playability in the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the third start is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. Let the ball enter the mouth 26. Then, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is performed, a small hit is generated, and the game ball can be increased in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between the big hits). In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than that when the first special symbol time reduction function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, the "4R 3rd big hit" and the "2R 6th big hit" activate the "1st special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd big hit" and "2R 6th big hit", after the big hit game is completed, the high accuracy high base state (first special symbol time saving state) is set until the next big hit occurs.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is a period to be performed, and as described above, many game balls are played in a short period of time by making small hits frequently while executing the second special symbol hit / fail judgment by right-handed games. It is a favorable period for the player, who can also expect to acquire. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (4R 3rd big hit game) related to "4R 3rd big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (4R 4th big hit game) related to "4R 4th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, after 100 times of the variation display of the special symbol, the gaming state becomes the low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the game interest. In the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state, that is, in the high-base state, the player does not reduce the number of balls held so much (when the rate of decrease of the balls held is slower than in the low-accuracy low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, after the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot" is completed, the high accuracy and high base state and after the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" are completed. By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. To do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the game interest.

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, and one time (and) compared to other big hits. The opening time of (total) is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R first big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, in the high-accuracy low-base state between large hits, by generating small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the game state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and the 4R first jackpot. The 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R fifth jackpot, 15% for the 2R sixth jackpot, and 35% for the 2R seventh jackpot. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the entry into the third starting port 26 where the fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R 5th big hit), and a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is a first hit rather than a big hit. 3 It is highly possible that a big hit is advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the starting port 26. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is a "variable pattern random number (also referred to as" variable pattern information ")". Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port 21 is in the operating state or not. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of operating states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is called a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/315). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a jackpot is large A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (big hit probability) is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. State A (low accuracy low base state) and state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state in which the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, a state mainly in determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player performs a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is executed. Is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for the big hit, 1000 seconds for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Since the base is low (first game state), it is impossible or difficult to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in the state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), since the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is operating, the right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which have been opened. In the state B, as in the state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not operating. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variable time of the second special symbol is a very long time. Since it is set to (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit, 1000 seconds for small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, by operating the first special symbol time saving function, the first special symbol time saving state is set, and the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed more frequently than the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, it has a state C (high accuracy and low base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state mainly for determining whether or not the second special symbol is correct. In state C (high accuracy and low base state), since the second special symbol time saving function is activated, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering the third starting port 26 by performing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the second special symbol time saving function is activated to set the second special symbol time saving state, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed more frequently than the states A and B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to execute the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol winning / failing determination.

In the state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the first special symbol is displayed. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even if the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a hold memory related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is performed. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed.

As described above, although the state B and the state C are both states in which the right-handed game is performed, in the state B, as in the state C, the game state is set in which the first special symbol winning / failing determination is mainly performed, and the state C Then, it is regarded as a game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. As a result, it becomes a big hit in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the so-called consecutive villa period (right-handed state) after shifting to the right-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. The game is diversified by shifting between the game state in which the game is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. In addition, since the game state in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed have different types of jackpots (big hit games) that can occur, right-handed strikes. During the continuation of the game, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of these game states. This makes it possible to prevent the game from getting bored and enhance the game's interest.

Further, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game smoothly without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (second special symbol hit / fail judgment, first). 2 It becomes possible to execute a special symbol variable game). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is not activated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in the state B, the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased, and in the state C, it is increased.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (first special symbol time saving function or second special symbol time saving function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C) for the state B. Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the period of operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so that these functions are not activated in the low base state. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of opening times is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game torrent or speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow rate may be provided. As a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is opened (the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and is second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35. In addition, the third out opening 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second large winning opening 35 from entering the second large winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, so that the player selects the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Because it is set to, even if the 2nd special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state (even if the ball is entered into the 3rd starting port 26), the variable display cannot be performed many times, and the game efficiency is very high. It's a bad thing. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner by the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, the frequency with which the second starting port 21 is opened is improved, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is increased by the first special symbol time saving function. Is shortened, and the game efficiency of right-handed games is improved. In such a case, it is more advantageous to perform the right-handed game and perform the first special symbol winning / failing determination than to perform the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the second special symbol time saving function shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the game efficiency by the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol changes for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 420/630) generated with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by frequently causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. Aim for the next big hit by the first special symbol hit / fail judgment without greatly reducing the number of balls held. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate of the game ball into the second start port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game, and the accuracy is high. While aiming to increase the number of balls held in the small hit game during the low base state, the next big hit is aimed at by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform small hit games), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, about 90% of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B are , Passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30, then flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second winning opening 35. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 and flow down to the out port 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball is entered into the winning opening, discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that does not exist. Further, the remaining 10% that does not flow into the gate 28 side enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, no small hit, and a 62/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 and other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the third starting port 21 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Enter the ball at 26 or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously (highly frequently) executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease speed of the ball held is reduced, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the right-handed game is smoothly entered by the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball can be opened, the game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first and does not enter the second start port 21. Only the second big winning opening 30 will enter the ball.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and will reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and smoothly proceed with the big hit game. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 when not during the big hit game. Absent.

Next, the high accuracy and low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also lower than that in the high base state. Since it is set to (1/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. It becomes a state. Since the probability of hitting is set to 1/240, it is almost possible that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. In addition, instead of such an aspect, the probability of winning in the normal symbol hit / fail judgment in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all the results may be out of order. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 is set to the second starting port 21. The probability of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit.

The game ball that flows down the downstream of the first winning opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is branched into a third starting port 26 side passage and a second starting port 21 side passage by a branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the third starting port 26 enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, it is unlikely that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, so that the game ball flowing into the passage on the second starting port 21 side is almost the same. All of them flow down to the second big winning opening 35 and the third out opening 34c provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened. , It is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 and flows down to the second large winning opening 35, and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big winning opening 35 which is.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low-base state continues at least until the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the player can increase the number of balls held as the high-accuracy low-base state continues for a long period of time. It will be possible. In the high accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol time is shortened and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (first special symbol long time state). The execution frequency of is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). Further, as a result, as the total winning balls in the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls of the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). In addition, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high base state where the small hit game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured so as to be hardly opened (the configuration may be such that the small hit is not opened at all). It is difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the second large winning opening 35 when the game occurs by entering the ball into the second starting opening 21. Therefore, a third out opening 34c is provided between the second starting opening 21 and the second big winning opening 35, and the ball entry rate to the third out opening 34c can be adjusted to make the second big winning. The ball entry rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to almost maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or suppress the speed of the holding ball decrease). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit), and a small state in which the game ball is inserted into the third starting port 26. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state), and has diversified playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) and a high accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the interest of games.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second start port 21 or the like to pass through the start gate 29, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the first gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide the 2 starting port 21, the 3rd starting port 26, and the 2nd big winning opening 35 upstream.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Also, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), the interrupt is disabled (S102), and the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like in each process described below. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, third start port sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , The first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) reads the detection signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the normal symbol random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Judgment (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically (S306), it is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, specifically, the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311). Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ") Is equivalent to.

The pre-judgment of whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). As the special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what type of big hit is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is judged in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible to set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that it is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / miss judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the values (0) to “238”), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), a normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the process during normal symbol variation (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801). Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or off normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal-figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If S1002 determines that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has passed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for each normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for normal figure is set ( S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and if "Special Figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), When the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed and the "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not Special Figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, one or more random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 are stored (in S1201). NO), special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest region of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the misses (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit by the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), any one of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit is executed. .. If the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, either the 15R 5th big hit, the 2R 6th big hit, or the 2R 7th big hit is executed (Fig. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the above is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot fluctuation table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a has an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low accuracy high base state, it shifts to a low accuracy low base state (normal state). In the high accuracy and high base state, "10000" is set in the state B counter, so that the value of the state B counter is substantially "0" even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation. Absent. That is, the high accuracy and high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the fluctuation display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the variation time in Special Figure 1 is interrupted (S2904), and the processing is completed. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first The special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round) Set "15" to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times (from opening to closing of the big winning opening in one round) (S2005), and set the big hit opening command to start the big hit game (S2006). ), Set the operation status of Special Figure 1 to "4" (S2007), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so set "4" to the value of the round counter (S2008) and move to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be variablely displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2009), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the winning / failing determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. 21 to 29 (S211) Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is more likely to be a jackpot with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (the first large prize device 31 and the second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination, the special figure 2 operation process has the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the state C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the second special symbol than fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (which can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is lowered. On the other hand, in the states A and B, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) than the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and various time (various game effects) can be produced. The variable pattern (which can be executed) can be selected. Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered.

Further, since the states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is disabled and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. It has been set for a long time. Specifically, when the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed in the states A and B, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a fluctuation time shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit in the state A. Further, in the state B, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the states A and B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not the main hit / fail judgment, but if an excessively long fluctuation time is set, the player who made the hit / fail judgment executes the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, if a big hit occurs as a result of the hit / fail judgment, the fluctuation time (the longest one) set in the main first special symbol is not set unnecessarily for a long time. Set a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the player is set a variable time in which the player can wait, and the player is inflicted with a disadvantage that the profit from the big hit that he has earned cannot be obtained. Absent. In addition, since the possibility of a big hit is low and the profit obtained is large, such control is used.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a fluctuation time that is even longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. Of the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is longer than the fluctuation display time when it is a big hit or a miss. Set.

Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol winning / failing determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the winning / failing determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently by executing the second special symbol winning / failing determination. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, a malicious player executes the second special symbol hit / fail judgment even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. There is a risk that a small hit will result in a game profit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed, there is a risk that a game profit may be unreasonably obtained due to an inappropriate game such as performing a right-handed game. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment that is not the main body is a small hit, the fluctuation time is set to a long time (the longest time). It prevents small hits (small hit games) from occurring frequently. Further, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small hit game is not so large, it does not cause much damage to the player who generated the small hit.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a fluctuation time that is even longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. In addition, the variation display time of the second special symbol that is not the main body in the states A and B is shorter than when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and the left-handed game should be performed. , Prevent the player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. As another aspect, the jackpot and the miss may have the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds, and both may be 600 seconds).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process (S2101) described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player launches the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the game machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31) have been opened (the big hit game has ended) in the big hit game.

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). When it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the jackpot game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot, 2R 6th jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots, and in S2201, the jackpot games are these. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot. Determine if it exists (S2203).

When it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 10,000 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. It is not possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol 10,000 times during the business hours of the game store in a day. Therefore, by setting "10000" in the status B counter, the next big hit is substantially generated. It means that the high base state (state B) is continued until. In addition, instead of the control for setting the number of times such as "10000" times in the state B, the control for maintaining the high base state (state) until the next big hit may occur.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is neither the 4R 3rd jackpot nor the 2R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the completed jackpot game is the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, when it is determined that it is one of the 15R fifth big hits (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag turned off. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

When it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the status B counter is set. Set "100" (S2207) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state of 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the low accuracy high base state is obtained.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between the multiple opening operations has elapsed (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, regardless of the passage of the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when S2303 determines that it is time to open the large winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second large winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large winning prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the game's interest. It should be noted that the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the game machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is in a winning game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. It has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") is a big hit. A high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given) based on a symbol (also referred to as a "specific display mode"), and a high-probability state (a privilege) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is supposed to end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power failure monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and a power failure signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control in the event of a power failure such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include random numbers for determining the variable effect that determine the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, random numbers for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interruption (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from speakers, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process shifts to the S4403 process. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start entry command (special figure 1 start entry command or special figure 2 start entry command) received by S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) is set according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are the special figure hold storage units (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big prize opening command sent based on the entry into 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , The process related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command, which will be described later, is performed (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set the round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is the ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening ball entering command), the big winning opening (1st big winning) specified based on the command A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4404), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, the effect modes C and D are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy and low base state, and the effect mode E is executed. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, as will be described later, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504. Set this (S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b (display screens 7a, 71a, 72a) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined.

In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols (same effect symbol) constituting the jackpot mode. ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, the game effect is executed using the predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show by the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Variation effect pattern setting process]
Next, a variation effect pattern setting process (S4505) for setting a variation effect pattern such as a reach effect (including a character effect, a story effect, etc.) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the variation effect pattern setting process (S4505), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the low probability low base state (state A) (S4601). When it is determined in S4601 that it is in a low probability low base state (state A) (YES in S4601), then whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, that is, the result of the variation effect pattern to be executed is the big hit mode. Determine if it is (S4602). If the S4602 determines that the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (YES in the S4602), then it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect (special effect including character effect, story effect, etc.) along with the variable display. (S4603). When it is determined in S4603 that the reach effect is not performed (NO in S4603), the process for setting other variable effect patterns is executed (S4660), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4603 that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in S4603), the process proceeds to determine the type (content) of the reach effect to be executed (S4604 or later). Here, in FIG. 56, the reach effect that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment will be described. As a reach effect, it has a plurality of reach types (reach effect types). Specifically, there are live reach (first reach) in which a predetermined character sings along with a predetermined song at a live venue, and karaoke reach (second reach) in which a predetermined character sings along with a predetermined song at a karaoke shop. , A humming reach (third reach) in which a predetermined character sings a humming song of a predetermined song while walking outside, and three types (plurality) of reach types. In addition, these reach will be a big hit when the predetermined character has sung the song to be executed, and will be missed when the predetermined character stops singing in the middle. It should be noted that four or more types of reach types may be provided.

Each reach type has a plurality of execution modes in which the music to be executed is different. For example, in live reach, a live reach (first execution mode) in which a predetermined character sings along with the first song at a live venue and a live reach (first execution mode) in which a predetermined character sings along with a second song at a live venue. Aspect), a live reach in which a predetermined character sings along with the third song at the live venue (first execution mode), and a live reach in which the predetermined character sings along with the fourth song at the live venue (first execution mode). And have. As shown in FIG. 56, when the live reach (first reach) is executed, the reach of the first execution mode of singing along with the first song has the highest jackpot reliability (the possibility of executing the jackpot game is high). The game effect shown), and the jackpot reliability is set to 80%. Therefore, when the live reach is executed, the player advances the game with the expectation that the music will be the first music.

Further, the live reach of the second execution mode of singing along with the second song has the second highest jackpot reliability, and the jackpot reliability is set to 20%. In addition, the live reach of the third execution mode of singing along with the third music has the third highest jackpot reliability, and the jackpot reliability is set to 10%. Further, the live reach of the fourth execution mode in which the song is sung along with the fourth music has the lowest jackpot reliability among the execution modes of the live reach, and the jackpot reliability is set to 20%. In this way, even with the same reach type reach (live reach), the jackpot reliability differs depending on the music (execution mode) executed along with the reach. Therefore, the player advances the game with the expectation that the live reach will be executed with the music (execution mode) having a higher jackpot reliability.

In addition, not only the jackpot reliability differs depending on the music executed along with the reach (execution mode), but also the music executed along with the reach (reach production) and the result of the reach (result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment). ) Notifies the player of predetermined game information. Specifically, when the live reach is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol and the first music (specific music) is executed in the live reach (first execution mode), the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is When it becomes a big hit, that is, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is a big hit, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability high base state (state B), and the low probability low base state (state A) or low It is not set to a high probability base state (state B) or a high probability low base state (state C).

Further, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined by the high probability and high base state (state B), but the state of the effect shifts to the non-notification state in which the above-mentioned common game effect is executed. Therefore, if a big hit occurs when the first music (specific music) is executed in the live reach, the game state after the big hit game to be executed thereafter is always in a non-notification state with a high probability and a high base state. A player who is aware of such a rule is relieved because he / she recognizes that the gaming state is not a low-probability high-base state but a high-probability high-base state even if the player shifts to the non-notification state. It becomes possible to play a game with. On the other hand, a player who does not recognize such a rule, or a player who recognizes it but does not see the game production and misses that the live reach of the first song is executed, ends the jackpot game state. In the later non-notification state, it is not possible to recognize that the state is a high probability and high base state, and the game is played with a sense of tension.

Further, when the live reach is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol and the second music is executed in the live reach (second execution mode), the result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a big hit, that is, If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the game state after the big hit game is set to either the high probability high base state (state B) or the low probability high base state (state B), and is low. It is not set to a low probability base state (state A) or a high probability low base state (state C). Further, if a big hit occurs when the second music is executed in the live reach, the game state after the end of the big hit game executed thereafter is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state, and becomes a non-notification state. Therefore, if a big hit occurs when the second song is executed in the live reach, it becomes difficult to determine which game state the non-notification state after the big hit game is set to, and the player feels nervous when playing the game. Will be done.

Further, when the live reach is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol and the third music is executed in the live reach (third execution mode), the result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a big hit, that is, If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends is a high probability high base state (state B), a low probability high base state (state B), or a high probability low base state (state C). ) Is set to any of the gaming states, and is not set to the low probability low base state (state A). Similarly, when the live reach is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol and the fourth music is executed in the live reach (fourth execution mode), the result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a big hit, that is, If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends is a high probability high base state (state B), a low probability high base state (state B), or a high probability low base state (state). It is set to any of the gaming states of C), and is not set to the low probability low base state (state A). It should be noted that which game state is set after the jackpot game is completed is determined by the type of jackpot described above.

In addition, the karaoke reach includes a karaoke reach (fifth execution mode) in which a predetermined character sings along with the first song common to the live reach at the karaoke store, and a second song in which the predetermined character is shared with the live reach at the karaoke store. It has a karaoke reach (sixth execution mode) in which a predetermined character sings in accordance with a fifth song (seventh execution mode) at a karaoke store. As shown in FIG. 56, when the karaoke reach (second reach) is executed, the reach of the fifth execution mode of singing along with the first song is the highest with the highest jackpot reliability (execution of the jackpot game) as in the live reach. It is said to be a game effect indicating that there is a high possibility), and the jackpot reliability is set to 10%. Therefore, when the karaoke reach is executed, the player advances the game with the expectation that the music becomes one music. Further, the karaoke reach of the sixth execution mode of singing along with the second song has the second highest jackpot reliability, and the jackpot reliability is set to 5%. Further, the karaoke reach of the seventh execution mode of singing along with the fifth music has the lowest jackpot reliability among the execution modes of the karaoke reach, and the jackpot reliability is set to 2%.

In addition, the humming reach is a humming reach (eighth execution mode) in which a predetermined character sings along with the first song common to the live reach during a walk, and a second song in which the predetermined character is shared with the live reach during a walk. It has a humming reach (9th execution mode) in which the character sings according to the song, and a humming reach (10th execution mode) in which a predetermined character sings along with the 6th music during a walk. As shown in FIG. 56, when the humming reach (third reach) is executed, the reach of the eighth execution mode of singing along with the first song is the highest jackpot reliability (execution of the jackpot game) as in the live reach. The jackpot reliability is set to 3%. Therefore, when the humming reach is executed, the player proceeds with the game expecting that the music becomes one music. Further, the humming reach of the ninth embodiment sung along with the second song has the second highest jackpot reliability, and the jackpot reliability is set to 2%. Further, the humming reach of the tenth execution mode of singing along with the sixth music has the lowest jackpot reliability among the execution modes of the humming reach, and the jackpot reliability is set to 1%.

Further, in the case of karaoke reach and humming reach, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-probability high-base state, a high-probability high-base state, or a high-probability low-base state regardless of the execution mode of any of the music types. It is set to any of the game states of. Further, the state after the jackpot game is completed may be set to a non-notification state (non-notification mode) or a notification state (notification mode).

Further, even if the reach executes the same first song (specification), the jackpot reliability differs depending on the reach type. That is, the case where the first song is executed in the live reach (first reach) is a big hit than the case where the first song is executed in the karaoke reach (second reach) or the humming reach (third reach). It is said to be a game production with high reliability and high feasibility of big hit games. Comparing live reach, karaoke reach, and humming reach as a whole, live reach is the most reliable reach production (game production), followed by karaoke reach, which is the most reliable reach production. , It can be said that humming reach is the most unreliable reach production.

In S4604, it is determined whether or not to execute the first reach (first reach type, live reach) (S4604), when it is determined to execute the first reach (YES in S4604), then the jackpot type is 4R 3rd. Determine if it is a big hit (S4605). When it is determined in S4605 that the jackpot type is the 4R third jackpot (YES in S4605), then it is determined whether or not to execute the first song in the first reach (S4606). This is determined based on a random number value acquired at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) and a first music determination table. Then, when it is decided in S4606 to execute the first music (YES in S4606), the first music is set (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4660. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4606 that the first music is not executed (NO in S4606), one of the second music, the third music, and the fourth music is determined as the music to be executed in the first reach, and the determined music. Is set (S4614), and the process proceeds to S4660. That is, even when the 4R third big hit, which is a high-probability and high-base state, is executed and the first reach is executed, there are cases where the first music is executed and cases where other music is executed.

When it is determined in S4605 that the jackpot type is not the 4R third jackpot (NO in S4605), then it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to either the 15R first jackpot or the 4R second jackpot (S4612). .. If the S4612 determines that the jackpot type is either the 15R first jackpot or the 4R second jackpot (YES in S4612), either the third or fourth song is the song to be executed in the first reach. Is determined, the determined music is set (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4660. On the other hand, in S4612, when it is determined that the jackpot type is neither 15R 1st jackpot nor 4R 2nd jackpot, that is, a jackpot type other than 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 1st jackpot and 4R 2nd jackpot ( (NO in S4612), one of the second music, the third music, and the fourth music is determined as the music to be executed in the first reach, the determined music is set (S4614), and the process proceeds to S4660.

If the S4604 determines that the first reach is not executed (NO in S4604), then determines whether to execute the second reach (second reach type, karaoke reach) (S4609), and executes the second reach. If it is determined that (YES in S4609), one of the first music, the second music, or the fifth music is determined as the music to be executed in the second reach, the determined music is set (S4610), and the processing of S4660 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second reach is not executed in S4609, that is, the third reach is executed (NO in S4609), either the first music, the second music, or the sixth music is executed as the music to be executed in the third reach. The determined music is set (S4611), and the process proceeds to S4660. Which reach type (first to third reach) is to be executed is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, the reach type determination table, and the reach determination random number acquired at a predetermined timing.

If the S4602 determines that it is not a big hit, that is, it is a miss (or a small hit) (NO in the S4602), then whether to perform a reach effect (special effect including character effect, story effect, etc.) along with the variable display. Determine if (S4651). When it is determined in S4651 that the reach effect is not performed (NO in S4651), the process for setting other variable effect patterns is executed (S4660), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4651 that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in S4651), the process proceeds to determine the type (content) of the reach effect to be executed. In S4652, when it is determined whether the reach type to be executed is the first reach (S4652) and it is determined to be the first reach (S4652), the first music, the second music, and the music to be executed in the first reach are determined. Either the third music or the fourth music is determined, the determined music is set (S4653), and the process proceeds to S4660.

If S4652 determines that the reach species to be executed is not the first reach (YES in S4652), then it is determined whether the reach species to be executed is the second reach (S4654). If S4654 determines that the reach type to be executed is the second reach (YES in S4654), one of the first music, the second music, or the fifth music is determined as the music to be executed in the second reach. Set the determined music (S4655) and move to the processing of S4660. If the S4654 determines that the reach type to be executed is not the second reach, that is, the third reach (NO in S4654), the first song, the second song, or the sixth song is the song to be executed in the third reach. One of the above is determined, the determined music is set (S4656), and the process proceeds to S4660.

When the S4601 determines that the current gaming state is not a low-probability low-base state (NO in S4601), then the variable effect pattern setting process for other gaming states other than the low-probability low-base state is performed (S4608). ), Move to the processing of S4660. Here, the details of the variation effect pattern setting process in the game state other than the low probability low base state will be omitted. Further, in S4660, other processing for determining the variation effect pattern is executed (S4660), and the processing is completed.

Next, the hit game effect process (S4408) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In the hit game production process (S4408), first, it is determined whether or not the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high probability low base state (S4701), and it is set to the high probability low base state, that is, the big hit type. Is the type that sets the high-probability low-base state after the big hit game (YES in S4701), the first song, the second song, the third song, and the third song are executed during the big hit game (first). Any of the 4th music, the 5th music, or the 6th music is determined, the determined music is set (S4702), and the process proceeds to S4706.

Here, as shown in FIG. 57, six types of music, the first music to the sixth music, are provided as the music that can be executed during the jackpot game. In addition, when the first music is executed during the big hit game, the high probability state is determined after the big hit game is completed. That is, the first music can be selected when the game state after the end of the big hit game is a big hit type in which the high probability is high base state or the high probability is low base state. Further, when the sixth music is executed during the big hit game, the high probability low base state is confirmed after the big hit game is completed. That is, the sixth music can be selected when the game state after the end of the big hit game is a big hit type in which the high probability and low base state are obtained.

If the S4701 determines that the gaming state after the jackpot game is not set to the high-probability low-base state (NO in S4701), then whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the high-probability high-base state is set. Is determined (S4703). When it is determined in S4703 that the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends is a high-probability high-base state (YES in S4703), the first song and the second song are executed during the jackpot game (first). One of the music, the third music, the fourth music, and the fifth music is determined, the determined music is set (S4702), and the process proceeds to S4706. Further, in S4703, when it is determined that the game state set after the end of the big hit game is not a high probability high base state, that is, a low probability high base state (a low probability low base state may be set) (S4703). NO), determine one of the second, third, fourth, or fifth music as the music to be executed during the jackpot game (first), and set the determined music (S4705). Move to S4706 processing. In S4706, other processing is executed and the processing is completed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

As a general rule, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide the mode as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in the present embodiment, when the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode in which the middle symbol → right symbol (also referred to as “first stop mode”) and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) stop mode (also referred to as "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C (3) In the state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation or the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit", the variation display is performed. It is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stop.

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the condition (1) in the production modes A and B (state A) that the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of the special figure works (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and based on this, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination being "off", and (3) ) In the effect mode C (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", the variation display is stopped. This is a feasible stop mode.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in the effect mode C (state C). Based on this, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the above.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variation display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variation display mode based on the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different and diversified according to the situation of the game. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5", "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter "blue"). It is also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt other correspondences, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment, and other colors are used. Can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, and the number symbol when having an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) that a player can acquire is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific disparity) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the big hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the disengagement mode (complete disparity, reach disparity). Of the (eyes), the reach-separated number is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the out-of-order modes (completely disjointed eyes, reach disjointed eyes), the completely disjointed eye is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first) based mainly on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. 1) Special symbol variation display) is performed, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special symbol variation display) is rarely performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation is caused by the effect display 102. Only display (and stop display) is to be performed. Similarly, the state B (high base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special) mainly based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. (Fluctuating display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display) only.

Similarly, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment mainly based on the entry into the third starting port 26 ( (Variation display of the second special symbol) is performed, and since it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol, this is performed. When the first special symbol hit / fail determination is made under such a situation, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but is performed by the effect display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is to be performed.

However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made in the state C (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Execution mode of notice production]
Next, an example of an execution mode of the advance notice effect executed by the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. The notice effects shown in FIGS. 58 to 60 are displayed in the effect hold display areas 9c and 9d provided at the lower part of the display screen 7a, the effect hold 9a and 9b (memory information), and the variable display area 9e. By setting the display mode of the stored display 9f (memory information) to a special display mode different from the normal display mode, the result of the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol is the jackpot mode (the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is the jackpot). It is a production that shows the possibility of becoming. These effects, such as the display mode of the effect hold 9a and 9b being a special display mode and the display mode of the storage display 9f as a special display mode, are also referred to as "hold change notice (memory information change notice)".

As described above, the advance notice effect means that the effect symbol stops and displays (determines) the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol) being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (specific mode). This is an effect shown before (stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol or before the start of the variable display of the effect symbol). The notice effect that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a big hit mode before the start of the variable display of the effect symbol is also referred to as a pre-effect or a look-ahead effect.

FIG. 58A shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol is being executed in the first game mode. In the first effect hold display area 9c, two first effect hold 9a (hold information, storage information, hold pattern, first storage information) are displayed. This means that the information (acquired information, judgment information, random value) acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is held without starting the variable display corresponding to the acquired information. Shown. That is, two pieces of information for which the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended are stored. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed or when the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be executed (for example, during the big hit game), the first special symbol is executed. When the ball enters the starting port (first starting port 20) according to the above, the acquired information is reserved and stored up to a maximum of four. Similarly, for the second special symbol, when the ball enters the starting port (second starting port 21, third starting port 26) related to the second special symbol, the acquired information is reserved and stored up to a maximum of four. To do.

In addition, the first production hold 9a indicated by "○" immediately above "1" corresponds to the oldest (previous) stored information among the acquired information related to the first special symbol stored. , The first effect hold 9a displayed directly above "4" corresponds to the newly stored information in the order of "2" and immediately above "3", and is the most recently stored information. In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol based on the stored information is started in the order of the oldest storage order. Further, the fluctuation display area (the fluctuation display unit) is provided in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the storage display 9f indicated by “◯” is displayed. The memory display 9f corresponds to the variable display of the effect symbol currently being executed, and depending on the display mode of the memory display 9f, the result of the variable display of the effect symbol being executed and the feasibility of the jackpot game (the feasibility of the jackpot game). High or low, etc.). The display modes of the first effect hold 9a related to the hold and the storage display 9f related to the change are both normal display modes and have not changed to the special display mode shown in FIG. 61. Further, a game mode display unit 202 is provided in the upper right upper part of the display screen 7a, and the current game mode is displayed here, and the player can grasp the current game mode by checking this display. To do.

Here, as the game mode, it has at least a plurality of game modes of a first game mode, a second game mode, and a third game mode. These game modes differ in the display mode of the background picture (background image) displayed on the display screen 7a and the game mode name, and the player can check the game mode display unit 202 as well as the background picture (background image). By looking at the image), it is possible to recognize which game mode is currently being executed. In addition, some or all of the playable game effects (reach effect, character effect, notice effect, etc.) differ depending on the game mode. Further, the first game mode, the second game mode, and the third game mode may be executed in the same game state or may be executed in different game states. The gaming state may mean a state A, a state B or a state C, a low probability low base state, a low probability high base state, a high probability low base state, or a high probability high base state. ..

FIG. 58 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time in the same variation display as in FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 58B shows a scene in which the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and one additional effect holding 9a is displayed during the variation display. The game mode is also the same first game mode as in FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the newly added (memorized) first effect hold 9a (holding pattern) is set to the display mode of "Δ", and is set to "○" which is the normal display mode. Is different. This display mode is referred to as a special display mode, and an effect in which such a display mode of the first effect hold is displayed (changes to) in a display mode different from the usual one is described as a "memory display change effect (hold change notice effect)". ". Further, when the first effect hold is displayed in the special display mode, it is shown that the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol related to the special display mode is a big hit is higher than that in the normal display mode. In this example, the normal display mode is not changed to the special display mode, but the pattern displayed in the special display mode from the time when the first effect hold is displayed is shown.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61, the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment has a common advance notice effect depending on the game mode and a different advance notice effect depending on the game mode. Specifically, in any of the first game mode, the second game mode, and the third game mode, the notice A (notice effect A), which is the "memory display change effect", can be executed. Further, the first game mode has a "memory display change effect" common to a plurality of game modes, and does not have a (dedicated) "memory display change effect" peculiar to the first game mode. .. Further, in the second game mode, in addition to the "memory display change effect" common to the plurality of game modes, the notice B (notice effect B) which is the (dedicated) "memory display change effect" peculiar to the second game mode. )have. Notice B is also referred to as "notice production for the second game mode". Further, in the third game mode, in addition to the "memory display change effect" common to the plurality of game modes, the notice B (notice effect B) which is the (dedicated) "memory display change effect" peculiar to the third game mode. )have. Notice C is also referred to as "notice production for the third game mode".

These notice A, notice B, and notice C are different in the execution mode of the "memory display change effect". That is, as the special display mode of the first effect hold, it has a special display mode of a different display mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the normal display mode (a) of the first game mode is set to “◯”. The notice A has three display modes as the special display mode, the special display mode (b) is "Δ", the special display mode (c) is "□", and the special display mode (d) is. The design is "☆". These are set with high jackpot reliability in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the notice B, which is the notice effect for the second game mode, the normal display mode (a) is set to "◎". The special display mode (b) is "tadpole", the special display mode (c) is "small fish", and the special display mode (d) is "large fish". "(See FIG. 61). These are set with high jackpot reliability in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d).

Further, in the notice C, which is the notice effect for the third game mode, the normal display mode (a) is set to "blue 〇". The special display mode (b) is "green 〇", the special display mode (c) is "red 〇", and the special display mode (d) is "gold". The design is "○" (see FIG. 61). These are set with high jackpot reliability in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In this way, when a plurality of game modes are provided and a "memory display change effect" (notice effect, game effect) common to the plurality of game modes and a "memory display change effect" unique to each game mode are provided, a special display is provided. The number of modes becomes large, and it may be difficult to recognize which pattern has high or low jackpot reliability.

In particular, since the "memory display change effect" peculiar to the game mode is executed only in the game mode, the execution frequency is inevitably reduced, and it becomes difficult to memorize the jackpot reliability while playing the game. On the other hand, since the "memory display change effect" common to a plurality of game modes can be executed in a plurality of game modes, the appearance frequency (execution frequency) of the special display mode becomes high, and the player has a jackpot reliability. It becomes relatively easy to recognize the correspondence with.

Further, in this embodiment, not only the change is made to the special display mode defined in each notice (notice A, notice B, notice C), but the change from notice B to notice A and from notice C to notice A. It is possible to change from the special display mode peculiar to the game mode to the special display mode common to the game mode, such as the change of the first effect, and the change mode of the first effect hold is further diversified. On the other hand, changes from the special display mode common to the game modes to the special display mode peculiar to the game mode, such as the change from the notice A to the notice B and the change from the notice A to the notice C, are prohibited. This is difficult to recognize from the special display mode in which the player can easily recognize the jackpot reliability while allowing the change from the special display mode in which the player can easily recognize the jackpot reliability to the special display mode in which the player can easily recognize the jackpot reliability. By prohibiting the change to the special display mode, it is easy for the player to recognize the correspondence between the special display mode and the jackpot reliability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game production, provide easy-to-understand game playability, and enhance the game interest.

FIG. 58 (c) shows a scene in which the variation display executed in FIG. 58 (b) is terminated and the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the out-of-order mode of “345”. The game mode is the same first game mode as in FIG. 58 (b). FIG. 58 (d) shows a scene in which the next variation display of the variation display of FIG. 58 (c) is started. Along with starting the variable display of the new effect symbol, the shift display process of the effect hold 9a and the storage display 9f is executed. In FIG. 58 (d), the memory display 9f displayed in FIG. 58 (c) disappears (display ends), and the variable display corresponding to “1” in the first effect hold 9a in FIG. 58 (c). Is started, the pattern displayed in "1" of the first effect hold display area 9c is moved to the variable display area 9e (shift display), and is newly displayed as the memory display 9f. To.

Along with this, the pattern displayed in "3" of the first effect hold display area 9c in FIG. 58 (c) and the pattern displayed in "2" are displayed in the first effect hold display, respectively. The movement display (shift display) is displayed in "2" and "1" of the area 9c. In this example, the first effect hold 9a, which is a special display mode of “Δ” by the memory display change effect 201 (hold change notice effect), is moved (shifted) while maintaining the display mode. ing.

FIG. 58 (e) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 58 (d) is started in the same first game mode. Further, as described above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are moving and displaying (shift display) while maintaining the display mode, respectively. FIG. 58 (f) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 58 (e) is started in the same first game mode. Further, similarly to the above, the storage display 9f of the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a of the first effect hold display area 9c are moving and displaying (shift display) while maintaining the display mode, respectively. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol executed in FIG. 58 (f) corresponds to the stored display (acquired information) displayed in the special display mode (“Δ”), and the player can display the normal display. The game is played with a high expectation as compared with the result of the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the memory display (acquired information) of the aspect (“◯”).

Whether or not to display the effect holding 9a of the special display mode or the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e or the variable display area 9e, or which display mode to display the special display mode is described above. It is determined based on the result of the preliminary judgment. Further, the memory display change effect 201 includes "variation display of the effect symbol indicating the feasibility of the jackpot game by prior determination (simply referred to as" target variation ")" and the effect symbol prior to the target variation. It is executed across the variable display and the variable display of a plurality of consecutive effect symbols.

58 (a1) and 58 (b1) show an example in which the memory display change effect 201 is executed at a timing different from the above-described example. FIG. 58 (a1) shows a scene in which the variable display of a predetermined effect symbol is being executed. At the position corresponding to "3" in the first effect hold display area 9c, the effect hold 9a of the special display mode of "Δ" is displayed by the memory display change effect 201. FIG. 58 (b1) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time in the same variation display as in FIG. 58 (a1). At a predetermined timing of the variation display of the effect symbol, the memory display change effect 201 is executed again during the execution, and the effect hold 9a of the special display mode of "△" is the special of "□" indicating higher jackpot reliability. The display mode has changed to the effect hold 9a. As a result, the player further raises the expectation for the jackpot for the target change. In addition, the execution mode (execution timing) of the memory display change effect 201 will be diversified to enhance the game interest.

59 (a2) to 59 (d2) show an example in which the memory display change effect 201 is executed at a timing different from the above-described example. FIG. 59 (a2) shows a scene in which the variation display of a predetermined effect symbol is being executed. Further, the game mode is set to the second game mode. In addition, at the position corresponding to "3" in the first effect hold display area 9c, a special display mode for the second game mode (dedicated to the second game mode) of the "tadpole" pattern is produced by the memory display change effect 201. Hold 9a is displayed. Further, in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold display area 9c, the memory display 9f and the first effect hold 9a of the normal display mode (“◎”) for the second game mode are displayed. ..

FIG. 59 (b2) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 59 (a2) is started in the same second game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are moving and displaying (shift display) while maintaining the display mode, respectively. FIG. 59 (c2) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 59 (b2) is started in the same second game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are each moved and displayed (shifted). Here, in FIG. 59 (b2), the first effect hold of the special display mode (tadpole pattern) displayed at the position corresponding to “2” in the first effect hold display area 9c shifts to the next variable display. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), when the shift display is performed, the special display mode for the second game mode (dedicated to the second game mode) of the "small fish" pattern is performed by the memory display change effect 201 again. It has changed to production hold 9a. That is, the display mode of the first effect hold 9a that has already been displayed (stored) changes to the display mode of another special display mode at the timing of shifting to the next variable display (at the timing of shift display). To do.

FIG. 59 (d2) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 59 (c2) is started in the same second game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are each moved and displayed (shifted). Here, in FIG. 59 (c2), the first effect hold 9a of the special display mode (small fish pattern) displayed at the position corresponding to “1” in the first effect hold display area 9c is changed to the next variable display. By shifting, shift display is performed in the variable display area 9e. Then, when the shift display is performed, as shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the memory display change effect 201 is performed again, so that the more reliable "big fish" pattern is used for the second game mode (dedicated to the second game mode). It has changed to the storage display 9f of the special display mode of. That is, at the timing when the display mode of the first effect hold 9a that has already been displayed (stored) shifts to the next variable display and shifts to the variable display area 9e, another special display mode is used. It changes to the display mode.

In this way, as the timing at which the special display mode is displayed (the timing at which the memory display change effect 201 is executed, the timing at which the display mode of the stored information changes), the timing of the start-in ball and the predetermined timing during the variation display of the effect symbol Timing, timing of shift display of effect hold in the effect hold display area, timing of starting variation display (target variation) of the effect symbol related to effect hold (that is, timing of shift display of effect hold to the memory display), etc. Various timings are set, which makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness and enhance the interest of the game.

59 (a3) to 59 (c3) show an example in which the memory display change effect 201 is executed in an execution mode different from the above-described example. FIG. 59 (a3) shows a scene in which the variation display of a predetermined effect symbol is being executed. Further, the game mode is set to the third game mode. In addition, at the position corresponding to "2" in the first effect hold display area 9c, the special display mode for the third game mode (dedicated to the third game mode) of the "green 〇" pattern is provided by the memory display change effect 201. The production hold 9a is displayed. Further, in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold display area 9c, the memory display 9f and the first effect hold 9a of the normal display mode (“blue 〇”) for the third game mode are displayed. There is.

FIG. 59 (b3) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 59 (a3) is started in the same third game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are each moved and displayed (shifted). Here, in FIG. 59 (a3), the first effect hold of the special display mode (green 〇 pattern) displayed at the position corresponding to “2” in the first effect hold display area 9c shifts to the next variable display. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 59 (b3), as shown in FIG. 59 (b3), the memory display change effect 201 changes to the effect hold 9a of the special display mode common to the plurality of game modes of the “☆” pattern. ing. That is, the special display mode (notice effect) for the second effect mode changes to the special display mode (notice effect) common to a plurality of game modes at the timing of shifting to the next variable display (at the timing of shift display). To do.

As a result, in the third game mode, the memory display change effect 201 peculiar to the third game mode is executed, and the first effect hold (memory information) is changed to the special display mode (notice C) peculiar to the third game mode. It was changing. Then, at a predetermined timing, the special display mode peculiar to the third game mode is changed to a common special display mode (notice A) that can be executed in common in a plurality of game modes. Further, by doing so, the change of the first production hold (stored information) in an unexpected manner is executed, and the game entertainment is enhanced. In addition, the memory display change effect peculiar to the game mode with a relatively low execution frequency is changed to the memory display change effect common to the game modes with a relatively high execution frequency. As a result, the player can easily recognize the jackpot reliability of the displayed special display mode, and enhances the interest of the game.

In addition, when changing from the memory display change effect peculiar to the game mode to the memory display change effect common to the game mode, the jackpot is higher (or higher) than the jackpot reliability indicated by the effect hold peculiar to the game mode before the change. It is assumed that the reliability will be changed to the production hold common to the game modes. For example, in the third game mode, when the effect hold "green 〇" (b) of the special display mode peculiar to the game mode is displayed, the special display modes common to the changeable game modes are "△" and "□". , "☆" is limited to the display mode. Further, the display mode may be limited to "□" and "☆".

FIG. 59 (c3) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 59 (b3) is started in the same third game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are moving and displaying (shift display) while maintaining the display mode, respectively. In addition, the first effect hold 9a of the special display mode (☆ pattern) displayed at the position corresponding to “1” in the first effect hold display area 9c shifts to the next variable display, so that the variable display area Shift display to 9e. The variation display of the effect symbol being executed in FIG. 59 (c3) is a variation display corresponding to the storage display of the special display mode of the “☆” symbol.

60 (a4) and 60 (b4) show an example in which the memory display change effect 201 is executed at a timing different from the above-described example. FIG. 60 (a4) shows a scene in which a variation display of a predetermined effect symbol is being executed. Further, the game mode is set to the second game mode. In addition, at the position corresponding to "3" in the first effect hold display area 9c, a special display mode for the third game mode (dedicated to the third game mode) of the "tadpole" pattern is produced by the memory display change effect 201. Hold 9a is displayed. Further, in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold display area 9c, the memory display 9f and the first effect hold 9a of the normal display mode (“◎”) for the second game mode are displayed. ..

60 (a5) to 60 (f5) show an example of executing the memory display change effect 201 of an execution mode different from the above-described example. FIG. 60 (a5) shows a scene in which the variation display of a predetermined effect symbol is being executed. Further, the game mode is set to the second game mode. In addition, at the position corresponding to "2" in the first effect hold display area 9c, the memory display change effect 201 is used to produce a special display mode for the second game mode (dedicated to the second game mode) of the "tadpole" pattern. Hold 9a is displayed. Further, in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold display area 9c, the memory display 9f and the first effect hold 9a of the normal display mode (“◎”) for the second game mode are displayed. ..

FIG. 60 (b5) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 60 (a5) is started in the same second game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are moving and displaying (shift display) while maintaining the display mode, respectively. FIG. 60 (c5) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 60 (b5) is started in the same second game mode. Similar to the above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are moving and displaying (shift display) while maintaining the display mode, respectively. Further, the first effect hold 9a of the special display mode (tadpole pattern) displayed in "1" of the first effect hold display area 9c in FIG. 60 (b5) shifts to the next variable display. Shift display is performed in the variable display area 9e. The variable display of the effect symbol being executed in FIG. 60 (c5) is a variable display corresponding to the memory display of the “tadpole” symbol.

FIG. 60 (d5) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time in the same variation display as in FIG. 60 (c5). The game mode is also set to the second game mode. In FIG. 60 (d5), the display is displayed in the special display mode (tadpole pattern) for the second game mode at a predetermined timing after the reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a (during the variable display of the effect symbol). A scene is shown in which the memory display change effect 201 that changes the display mode of the memory display 9f to a special display mode (☆ pattern) common to a plurality of game modes is executed. Further, in this example, in the memory display change effect 201, the display mode of the memory display 9f is not only changed from the special display mode for the second game mode to the special display mode common to the plurality of game modes. The display mode of the first effect hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c is also changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60 (d5), all the first effect hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c at that time is displayed in the same manner as the special display mode of the stored display after the change. Change to a mode (special display mode). The feasibility of the jackpot game indicated by this special display mode is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol currently being executed. In this way, by changing the memory display and the first effect hold to the same special display mode, it is possible to make the occurrence of the memory display change effect stand out, make the player recognize it, and raise the expectation for the big hit. It will be possible. Further, in this way, the effect mode for changing the memory display and the first effect hold to the same special display mode is not executed in the special display mode peculiar to the game mode, and the special display common to a plurality of game modes is not executed. Perform only in aspects.

FIG. 60 (e5) shows a scene in which the variation display executed in FIG. 60 (d5) is finished and the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the out-of-order mode of “757”. The game mode is the same second game mode as in FIG. 60 (d5). In addition, although FIG. 60 (e5) shows an example in which the result of the variation display of the effect symbol shown in FIG. 60 (d5) is an out-of-order mode, it may be a big hit mode. FIG. 60 (f5) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 60 (e5) is started. In FIG. 60 (e5), the special display mode of the first effect hold of the first effect hold display area 9c returns to the normal display mode by displaying the fixed stop display in the off mode. Then, in the same manner as described above, the storage display 9f in the variable display area 9e and the first effect hold 9a in the first effect hold display area 9c are moved and displayed (shifted), respectively.

[Execution mode of game production]
Next, using FIGS. 62 to 64, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, story) that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment and is executed according to the variable display of the effect symbol. An example of an execution mode of (directing, etc.) will be described. FIG. 64 shows a part of the game effect that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. The battle reach shown in FIG. 64 is a game effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight, and when the ally character wins, a big hit is obtained, and when the enemy character wins, the game is lost. As shown in FIG. 64, the battle reach (fourth reach) has two types of execution patterns. In the lower execution mode of the battle reach, the first musical piece is output as a game sound as the battle reach is executed (progressed). Further, the sound pressure of the first music is set to a sound pressure level of a middle level (for example, 70 dB), and the frequency is mainly configured in the middle range (for example, 200 Hz to 500 Hz). Further, when the above-mentioned battle reach (lower row) is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes the jackpot mode, that is, the feasibility of the jackpot game is determined. It is set to 30%. The description of the progress of the display mode of the battle reach will be omitted. The battle reach (lower) corresponds to the "second specific game production".

As for the execution mode of the upper stage of the battle reach, the first music is output as a game sound as in the lower stage mode as the battle reach is executed (progressed). Further, the sound pressure of the first music is set to a large level (for example, 90 dB) sound pressure level unlike the lower mode, and the frequency is mainly configured in the middle range (for example, 200 Hz to 500 Hz) as in the lower mode. To. Further, when the above-mentioned battle reach (upper stage) is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes the jackpot mode, that is, the feasibility of the jackpot game is determined. It is set to 80%. The battle reach (upper row) corresponds to the "first specific game production".

In this way, both game effects that output the same game sound (first song) together with the battle reach (fourth reach, game effect) in the same display mode (both ally characters and enemy characters appear) are sound pressure. Level is different. Then, the game production having a large sound pressure level (large level) of the game sound executed with the variable display of the effect symbol is a big hit than the game production having a small sound pressure level (medium level). The game is highly feasible. As a result, during the progress of the game, even if the display mode such as the reach effect is the same, if the game sound with a sound pressure larger than before is output, the player feels the expectation for the big hit game. To enhance the game fun.

In addition, when the execution mode of the upper stage of the battle reach is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the entire period during the variable display of the effect symbol is not executed at a large level of sound pressure, but the effect symbol is displayed. It may be executed with a large level of sound pressure in a specific period which is a part of the execution period of the variable display (a part of the game production, a part of the battle reach). During periods other than the specific period (other periods), the sound pressure is medium level. In addition, before outputting a large level sound pressure (before the start of a specific period), it is notified in advance that a large level sound pressure is output (can be output). As a result, the player can prepare for the output of the large level of sound pressure before the output of the large level of sound pressure, and the sudden output of the large level of sound pressure can prevent surprise. The specific period is a period during which the game sound can be output at a large level of sound pressure.

An execution mode of this advance notification is shown in FIG. FIG. 62A shows a scene in which the battle reach is executed with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol. At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, an effect in which the ally character 217 and the enemy character 218 fight is executed. Further, on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the reach mode “7 ↓ 7”. Further, in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a specific period notification unit 211 for notifying that the specific period is set (becoming a specific period) is provided, and the specific period notification unit 211 will have a specific period from now on. A specific period advance notification effect 212 is executed to notify that a large level of sound pressure is output. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), a warning message "There is a possibility that a large sound pressure may be output. Please be careful." Is displayed. Further, the third display screen 72a also has a specific period notification unit 211, and executes the specific period advance notification effect 212. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62A, the display "The specific period is about to begin !!" is displayed.

FIG. 62B shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time in the same variation display as in FIG. 62A. In FIG. 62B, the specific period advance notification effect 212 is completed, and the specific period notification unit 211 of the display screen 7a and the third display screen 72a executes the specific period effect 213 indicating that the specific period is being executed. , Start a specific period. When a specific period is started, the game sound may be output at a large level sound pressure during the period, or the game sound may be output at a large level sound pressure during a part of the specific period. It may be output.

Further, as another game production, it has an athletic meet reach shown in FIG. The athletic meet reach is a game production in which a specific character (not shown) competes with another character (foot race), and if the specific character is ranked first, it will be a big hit, and if the other character is ranked first, it will be a miss. is there. As shown in FIG. 64, the athletic meet reach (fifth reach) has four types of execution patterns. In the execution mode of the uppermost stage (first stage) of the athletic meet reach, the same first music as the lower stage of the battle reach is output as a game sound with the execution (progress) of the athletic meet reach. Further, the sound pressure of the first music is set to a sound pressure level of a middle level (for example, 70 dB), and the frequency is mainly configured in the middle range (for example, 200 Hz to 500 Hz). In addition, when the athletic meet reach (first stage) described above is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol will be a big hit mode is set to 20%. .. The description of the progress of the display mode of the athletic meet reach will be omitted.

In this way, the execution mode of the athletic meet reach (first stage) is the same as the type, sound pressure, and frequency of the music, and the display mode (reach type) is different from that of the battle reach (lower stage). The battle reach (4th reach) is set to have a higher feasibility (big hit reliability) of the jackpot game than the athletic meet reach (5th reach). In addition, compared to the battle reach (upper row), the type and frequency of the music are the same, the sound pressure and display mode (reach type) are different, and the battle reach (fourth reach) with a higher sound pressure is used. , The feasibility (big hit reliability) of the big hit game is set higher than that of the athletic meet reach (fifth reach). The athletic meet reach (first stage) corresponds to the "second specific game production".

Further, in the second stage execution mode of the athletic meet reach, a second musical piece different from the battle reach is output as a game sound with the execution (progress) of the athletic meet reach. Further, the sound pressure of the second music is set to a sound pressure level of a medium level (for example, 70 dB), and the frequency is mainly composed of a high frequency range (for example, 1 KHz to 5 KHz). Further, when the above-mentioned athletic meet reach (second stage) is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol will be a big hit mode is set to 10%. .. Further, in the execution mode of the third stage of the athletic meet reach, the same second music as the second stage of the athletic meet reach is output as a game sound with the execution (progress) of the athletic meet reach. Further, the sound pressure of the second music is set to a medium level sound pressure level, and the frequency is mainly configured in the midrange (for example, 200 Hz to 500 Hz). In addition, when the athletic meet reach (third stage) described above is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol will be a big hit mode is set to 5%. .. Further, in the execution mode of the lowest stage (fourth stage) of the athletic meet reach, the same second music as the second and third stages of the athletic meet reach is output as a game sound with the execution (progress) of the athletic meet reach. Further, the sound pressure of the second music is set to a medium level sound pressure level, and the frequency is mainly composed of a low frequency range (for example, 20 Hz to 100 KHz). In addition, when the above-mentioned athletic meet reach (fourth stage) is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol will be a big hit mode is set to 2%. .. The athletic meet reach (third stage) corresponds to the "second specific game production".

As described above, when the execution modes of the athletic meet reach of the second to fourth stages are compared, the display mode of the game effect, the type of music, and the sound pressure are set in the same manner, and the frequencies are different. Then, the execution mode having a high frequency is set to have a higher feasibility (big hit reliability) of the jackpot game than the execution mode having a low frequency. That is, the display mode of the game effect, the type of music, and the sound pressure are the same, and the frequencies are different, so that the game effect has different jackpot reliability. As a result, even if the sound pressure is the same, sounds of different loudness can be heard due to the different frequencies. That is, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the game effect only by changing the frequency. The player feels a sense of discomfort in the game production, which looks the same but has a different loudness of the game sound, and the discomfort enhances the interest of the game and raises the expectation for the big hit game. Is possible.

In the embodiment of the above-described embodiment, when a specific period in which a large level of sound pressure is output is executed, the specific period is generated, that is, the large level of sound pressure is output in the specific period. The advance notification was performed by the advance notification effect 212. By this advance notification, a game sound with a large level of sound pressure is suddenly output, and it is prevented that the player is surprised and the game interest is deteriorated. In addition to or changing such a configuration, the configuration shown in FIG. 63 may be adopted.

FIG. 63 (a) shows a scene in which the battle reach is executed with the variable display of the predetermined effect symbol, as in the case of FIG. 62 (a). At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, an effect in which the ally character 217 and the enemy character 218 fight is executed. Further, on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed in the reach mode “7 ↓ 7”. Further, in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a specific period notification unit 211 for notifying that the specific period is set (becoming a specific period) is provided, and the specific period notification unit 211 will have a specific period from now on. A specific period advance notification effect 212 is executed to notify that a large level of sound pressure is output. Further, the third display screen 72a also has a specific period notification unit 211, and executes the specific period advance notification effect 212.

In FIG. 63A, in addition to the same display as in FIG. 62A, the specific period selection effect 214 is executed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This specific period selection effect 214 is executed together with the specific period advance notification effect 212, and the player arbitrarily selects whether to execute the specific period scheduled after this or to stop without executing the specific period. It is a possible production. The player operates the above-mentioned effect buttons (first effect button 63a, second effect button 63b), selects and operates either "execute" or "stop", and performs a decision operation to determine an arbitrary one. .. If "execute" is decided, then a specific period in which a large level of sound pressure is output is executed. On the other hand, Abe who decides to "stop" is not executed for a specific period during which a large level sound pressure is output, that is, a large level sound pressure is not output.

A player who is not good at high-level sound pressure cancels the execution of the specific period in advance when it is notified in advance that the specific period in which the large-level sound pressure is output will be executed, and the large-level sound pressure is output. You can choose not to output sound pressure. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is not good at a large level of sound pressure from deteriorating the game's interest due to the output of a large level of sound pressure. Further, the third display screen 72a is provided with a remaining period display unit 215 indicating the remaining period of the specific period selection effect 214, and the player can see the time displayed on the remaining period display unit 215 as “0”. It is necessary to select one by the time. If the player does not select any of the time displayed on the remaining period display unit 215 before the time becomes "0", the specific period is executed thereafter. Further, no matter which one is selected by the player in the specific period selection effect 214, it does not affect whether the result of the variation display of the effect symbol is a big hit or a miss.

FIG. 63 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 63 (b) shows a scene in which "execute" is selected and determined in the specific period selection effect 214 executed in FIG. 63 (a). As a result, the execution for a specific period was decided. FIG. 63 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (b). In FIG. 62C, the specific period advance notification effect 212 is completed, and the specific period notification unit 211 of the display screen 7a and the third display screen 72a executes the specific period effect 213 indicating that the specific period is being executed. , Start a specific period. When "Stop" is selected / determined in FIG. 63 (b), the specific period is not executed and a large level of sound pressure is not output.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. When the game state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state by changing to such a big hit type, or in addition to such a big hit type, a predetermined number of times in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the variation display of the special symbol (50 or 100) is completed, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to the high accuracy and low base state. By providing such a jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, the jackpot type is subsequently changed. The game state has a case of shifting to a low-accuracy low-base state, a case of continuing the high-accuracy high-base state, and a case of shifting to a high-accuracy low-base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the changing mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, enhance the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times, the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state to shift to after the execution of. As a result, the player's playing interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for the advantageous state is increased. Further, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, the game state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game in anticipation of. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment for a long period of time.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (variable state display 49 c1 and c2). ) Are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of such an aspect, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation). The display control of c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub control unit. As a result, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control unit, if the display control of the other control is appropriate, it is possible to notify the correct game information. Further, both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display shall be provided on the same display unit (main display 40). As a result, a first special symbol display controlled by the main control unit and a second special symbol display controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control is performed. It is possible to easily confirm that there is no problem with.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, the display control of both the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is performed by the main control unit. I decided to do it. In this mode, the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. As a result, the same effect as that of the special symbol display described above is obtained.

Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol hold indicator, a second second special symbol hold indicator, and a second normal figure (not shown) are shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) are mainly controlled. The display is controlled by the unit, and the second special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator, second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are controlled by other control units such as the sub-control unit. It may be controlled by. In addition, these, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), the first The special figure holding indicator (2nd 1st special figure holding indicator, 2nd special figure holding indicator) and 2nd normal drawing holding indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the two, easily confirm the consistency of the displayed contents, and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), the first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), and the first special symbol hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b), 1st normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), 2nd special symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second ordinary symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49 c3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided on the outside (outside) of the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 on the outside (outside) of the game area 3.

In addition, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the display is controlled by the main control unit when the power is supplied again. Special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol hold indicator (first special symbol) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first normal figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42) first execute display (display control) (restart and return). , The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second special figure whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator later execute (restart, return) display (display control). ..

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second feature whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The figure hold indicator (the second first special figure hold indicator, the second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. The display (display control) is executed (restarted and restored) before (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / and the third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display lights, turns off, and blinks a single LED, respectively, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and so on. This is because the 3 image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display unit and has more complicated display control than the main display device.

As a result, even if the display unit shows the special symbol hit / miss judgment result or the fluctuation state controlled by the same sub-control unit, the first sub-display unit that quickly returns the display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored). And a second sub-display unit that returns the display with a delay after that. Then, depending on each role, it becomes possible to execute the optimum game control. The first sub-display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (variable state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator are applicable and simple. With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display unit corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. However, with complicated display control, various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) can be displayed, and it is possible to improve the taste by various game effects.

Further, in still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the sub-control unit will supply power again. A second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), a second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and a second special symbol hold display (second) whose display is controlled. 2 1st special figure hold indicator, 2nd 2nd special figure hold indicator), 2nd normal figure hold indicator first executes (restarts, returns) display (display control), and the main control unit First special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol whose display is controlled by The hold display (first special figure hold display 43a, second special figure hold display 43b) and the first normal figure hold display (normal figure hold display 42) later execute (restart) display (display control). , And the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or / and third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit is further displayed (display control). ) May be executed (restart, return).

In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first special symbol described later). Or, it is assumed that the variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

Further, with respect to the configuration of the game machine described above, a "variable ball entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the 1st hit / miss judgment or the 2nd hit / miss judgment is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , So-called special figure 2 priority control process, control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to generate a high base state having a first starting port and a second starting port and increasing the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary judgment) ("Starting ball entry processing (S205)". See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-judgment method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be pre-determined. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the start-in ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Was provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub liquid crystal (sub display device), but the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the panel side display means as the main liquid crystal (first image display). It may be provided on the left and right sides of the device 7), or one sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be done. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) were all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 71. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, it is possible to display various effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
The conventional game machine is provided with a first starting port, a second starting port, a first large winning opening, and a second large winning opening, and when a game ball enters the first starting port, the first symbol is variablely displayed and the first symbol is displayed. 2 When a game ball enters the starting port, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, only one of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening is opened, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened. There was a game machine that executes a big hit game in which the winning openings are opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

Further, in the conventional game machine, the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. Some games were aimed at the 1st start port, and some games were aimed at the 2nd start port in the high base state. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right side area of the game area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a game machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide a highly tasteful game playability.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, it provides a highly tasteful gaming state, diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. It provides a game machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The third starting port where the game ball can enter and
A first hit / fail determination executing means that executes a first hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port, and
A second hit / fail determination execution means for executing a second hit / fail determination to be executed based on the ball entering the third start port, and
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , And the game state setting means that can be set,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first hit / fail judgment or the second hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific result), and the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in the second gaming area.
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the first game area in the first game state and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and the second game in the second game state. A second game (low accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball is launched into an area and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and a game ball is launched into the second game area in the first game state to execute the first game. 2 It is characterized by having a third game (high accuracy and low base state) that is mainly executed by a hit / fail judgment.

According to such a game machine, a first start port for executing the first hit / fail judgment is arranged in the first game area, and the first hit / fail judgment is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state). A variable second starting port and a third starting port for executing the second hit / fail determination are arranged. Further, as the gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency) in the first game state, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than that in the first gaming state. It has a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, the first game is launched aiming at the first start port of the first game area and executed mainly by the first hit / fail determination, and in the second game state, the second start port of the second game area is executed. The first game, which is mainly executed by aiming at and executing the first hit / fail judgment, and the second game, which is mainly executed by aiming at the third start port of the second game area in the first game state and executing the second hit / fail judgment. It has one game and.

As a result, the player can play the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and enhance the game interest by the transition mode of various game states and the new game characteristics. It will be possible. In the first game state, the frequency of ball entry to the first game area and the ball to enter the first start port is higher than the frequency of ball entry to the second game area to enter the second start port. May be higher.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a third big hit and a fourth big hit.
In the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail determination is the third big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second hit / miss determination is the fourth big hit, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the fact that.

According to such a game machine, the result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game of launching the game ball into the first game area, and the first hit / fail determination in the second game of launching the game ball into the second game area. As a result, it has a first big hit and a second big hit, and has a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the second big hit is reached, the third game can be executed. Further, in the case of the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the second big hit. Further, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the fourth big hit.

As a result, regardless of whether the first game is a first big hit or a second big hit after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing a game ball into the second game area. Further, regardless of whether the second game or the third game is performed while performing the game to be launched into the second game area, the game (second game) in which the first hit / fail judgment is performed and the second game 2 It is possible to play a game while shifting the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) for which the hit / fail judgment is performed. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2.
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the execution of the first hit / fail determination a specific number of times, and the game shifts to the first game. ..

According to such a game machine, when the first hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the game shifts from the second game to the first game by executing the hit / fail determination a specific number of times. Further, in the game that executes the same first hit / fail determination, the game shifts from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

In the third game, the third game may be continued even if the second hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times. Further, in the third game, the third game may be continued until the result of the second hit / fail determination is a big hit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination, a small hit (second specific result) is obtained, and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of game profit can be obtained.
The second hit / fail determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first hit / fail determination.
In the second game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail determination is higher than that of the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game by making it possible to obtain a game profit by the small hit.

According to such a game machine, it has a small hit that can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment has a higher probability than the first hit / fail judgment. It is supposed to be a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of being a small hit than the first and second games. Further, it is assumed that the second game, which is the second game state, is executed more frequently than the first game, which is the first game state. In the second game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. As a result, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. Further, as a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode among various gaming states having different advantages, and to enhance the gaming interest by new game characteristics. It should be noted that the result of the second hit / fail determination may be a small hit, and the result of the first hit / fail determination may be no small hit.

Further, in the second game state, there may be a fourth game (high accuracy and high base state) in which the game ball is launched into the second game area and the first hit / fail determination is mainly executed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, in the fourth game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail judgment is higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease speed of the game medium is slower than that in the first game, and the third game is a game by a small hit. By making it possible to obtain profits, the rate of decrease of the game medium may be slower than that of the second game and the fourth game. Further, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the decreasing speed of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second jackpot (corresponding to the second jackpot When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of the first embodiment are reached, the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of the first embodiment). Make the 4th game executable
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. Make the game executable
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R 7th big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the fourth big hit (Example). When the 15R 5th jackpot of 1 is reached, the 3rd game can be executed, and when the result of the 2nd hit / fail judgment is the 6th jackpot (corresponding to the 2R 6th jackpot of Example 1), the 4th game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

The "decrease rate of the game medium used for the game" is given in the same period from the game medium (fired game ball) used in a unit time (for example, 1 minute) or a unit number of shots (for example, 100 shots). The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid out prize balls) is calculated as the number of reductions in the game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is played for a predetermined period, the decrease speed of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) owned by the player is in descending order of the decrease speed. , 1st game> 2nd game (4th game)> 3rd game. In the third game, the more the game is continued, the more balls can be held by a small hit, so that the decrease speed can be said to be negative. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state of playing while reducing the number of balls held, while the third game is in a state of playing while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a big hit is more than the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, there are cases where the prize ball is obtained after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the prize ball is acquired. It is assumed that there is a case where the third game is reached after an easy jackpot game. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the first hit / fail judgment, there is no case where the prize ball goes through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be possessed only when it becomes the third game after the big hit game which is easy to acquire.

In addition, the probability of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is set to be higher than the probability of a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination can be increased. More preferably, it is desirable that the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is 1/2 or more. Further, the probability of entering the high probability state (probability of operating the probability fluctuation function) is the same in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment. On the other hand, the probability of entering state C (high probability / low base state) may be different between the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment state C (high probability / low base state) may be set. The rush probability of is higher than the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the launching game in the second game area where the third game for which the second hit / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, in the second hit / fail judgment, if a big hit does not enter the state C (high accuracy / low base state), the big hit is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the big hits (big hit game) in the second hit / fail judgment. Is the least big hit (big hit game). Further, the big hit is a big hit (big hit game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the smallest among the big hits (big hit game) in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment.

According to the game machine of the reference invention 1, it is possible to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game by diversifying the transition mode of the game state.

(Reference Invention 2)
In some conventional game machines, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. In such a game machine, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and if the result of the hit / miss judgment is wrong, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the missed symbol. .. Further, as a symbol, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of symbols of a special symbol and an effect symbol (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional game machine are both variable display and stop display based on the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, the special symbol shows the result of the hit / fail judgment by stopping and displaying the change display without performing the game effect such as the reach variation, and the effect symbol displays the stop display by performing the game effect such as the reach variation after the variation display. This shows the result of the pass / fail judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it is possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the consistency of both symbols due to the relationship between the display mode and the display position of a plurality of symbols. The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair game machine by facilitating confirmation of a plurality of symbols by displaying a plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A pass / fail judgment execution means that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A second identification information display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b) that variablely displays the second identification information (effect symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A third identification information display unit (variable state indicator 49) that variablely displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in association with the variable display of the second identification information.
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result.
A first display unit (main display 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and
It is characterized by including a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

According to such a game machine, a first identification information display unit that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and a second identification information (directed symbol) are variablely displayed. The second identification information display unit, the third identification information display unit that displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information can be displayed. It has a game effect display unit. Further, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display unit having a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. It has a department.

As a result, it is possible to confirm the second identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game effect by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the hit / fail judgment by checking the first display unit. The first identification information and the third identification information that are variablely displayed can be confirmed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
A game machine having a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and playing a game by letting the game ball flow down into the game area.
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

According to such a game machine, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is arranged outside (outside) the game area, and a second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display unit in the game area that displays the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the result of the hit / miss determination, the second display unit is provided while checking the flow of the game ball. It is possible to confirm the display mode of. In addition, the first display unit on which the first identification information and the third identification information can be confirmed is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area, so that the first display unit is not confused by the game production or the like. It is possible to surely grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that divides the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that divides the game area). It may be arranged in.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2.
The first display unit is composed of LEDs, and the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals.
The second display unit is characterized in that it is larger than the first display unit.

According to such a game machine, the first display unit is composed of LEDs, the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals, and the second display unit is a display unit larger than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be simplified to ensure that the display modes of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by configuring it with liquid crystal, it is possible to execute a variety of game productions and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3.
A main control unit having the pass / fail determination executing means,
It has a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control.
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are displayed by the sub control unit. It is characterized by display control.

According to such a game machine, it has a main control unit and a sub control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control. Then, among the first display units, the first identification information display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is displayed and controlled by the sub control unit. Further, the display control of the second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is performed by the sub control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control unit and the third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub control unit. As a result, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and the third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. Further, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes a control related to display control of a special symbol, a control related to a hit / fail judgment, a game related to sensor detection, a control related to ejection of a prize ball, and a control related to opening and closing of a variable entrance, and is a control unit that controls the game. Is. Further, the sub control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and controls the operation of the movable member and the display control of the effect display unit to control the game effect. It is a subordinate control unit of the control unit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
A game information storage means that can store predetermined game information,
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power and
Based on the detection of a drop in the power supply voltage, the game information stored in the game information storage means can be stored for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped.
A game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the storage holding means when the power supply means starts power supply is provided.
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers faster than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

According to such a game machine, when the power supply is started, the game information recovery means for recovering the game information when the memory holding means detects a decrease in the power supply voltage based on the game information stored in the memory is provided. .. Then, when the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit possessed by the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit, and the display control can be executed. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal in order to diversify the game production, and it takes a certain amount of time to restore the game information because various display controls are performed. On the other hand, since the first display unit (third identification information display unit), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to recover the game information.

As a result, even if the display unit is controlled by the same sub-control unit, the third identification information display unit is restored prior to the second display unit, and the display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, this makes it possible to start the game immediately after the start of power supply in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but it takes time to restore the second display unit composed of the liquid crystal (it is still restored even after the start of the game). (Not) may be. Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit which has spread quickly and can start the display control.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to easily confirm a plurality of symbols and provide a fair gaming machine by displaying a plurality of symbols.

(Reference Invention 3)
In a conventional game machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When the result of the hit / fail judgment is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. There was one that performed a big hit game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and there is a possibility that the result of the hit / fail judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. It showed the possibility of (for example, JP-A-10-57583). Further, as a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.), there is a device having a plurality of game effects having different execution modes and showing different jackpot reliability depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, the player's game interest is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the game interest is further enhanced when the jackpot is advantageous. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, there are cases where the game shifts to a predetermined game state and cases where the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state than the predetermined game state.

In the game machine as described above, when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, the game entertainment taste is enhanced, but on the other hand, the production mode of the game production is uniform and there is a possibility that the game entertainment taste is deteriorated. The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a game machine capable of executing a game production that enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect according to the variable display of the knowledge information, and
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball, and a special game execution means.
A game machine provided with a game state setting means for setting a predetermined game state after the end of the special game.
The gaming state includes a first gaming state (low probability high base state) and a second gaming state (high probability high base state) that is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The game state setting means may be set to the first game state or the second game state after the special game is completed.
As the game production, a second game production (a game accompanied by a second music) having a different production mode (music, display mode) from the first game production (a specific music, a game production accompanied by the first music). (Direction), and has
When the second game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific result and the special game is executed, after the special game is completed, There are cases where the first gaming state is set and cases where the second gaming state is set.
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific result and the special game is executed, after the special game is completed, The first gaming state may not be set, but the second gaming state is set.
By executing a common effect in the first game state and the second game state set after the end of the special game, the game state is the game state from the common effect executed after the end of the special game. It is characterized in that it is difficult to determine whether it is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first gaming state (low probability high base state) and a second gaming state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous than the first gaming state. doing. Further, as the game production, at least the first game production (game production accompanied by the first music) and the second game production (game with the second music) having different production modes (music, display mode) from the first game production (Direction) and has. When the second game effect is executed and the special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the first game state and when it is set to the second game state. have. Further, when the first game effect is executed and the special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is not set to the first game state, but is set to the second game state. Further, it is difficult to determine the game state by executing a common effect in the first game state and the second game state after the end of the special game.

As a result, when the first game effect is executed and the special game is executed, after the end of the special game, the common effect is executed and the game state shifts to a state in which it is difficult to determine the game state, but the game state. Is determined to be in the second gaming state, which is advantageous for the comparative period. Therefore, a player who confirms the generation process of the special game (type of game production) and recognizes such a relationship, even if the game state shifts to a state in which it is difficult to determine the game state after the special game ends, the game state. Recognizes that is in the second gaming state, and can play the game with a sense of security. On the other hand, a player who does not recognize such a relationship or a player who has not confirmed the generation process (type of game production) of the special game is in a state where it is difficult to determine the game state after the end of the special game. , It is not possible to determine that the gaming state is the second gaming state, and the game is played with a sense of tension. In this way, it is possible to give different tastes to each player, prevent tiredness of the game, and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the first game production is a game production (reach production, character production) accompanied by a specific music (first music), and the second game production is not accompanied by a specific music or a specific music (first music). It may be a game production accompanied by a different music (second music, third music or fourth music).

In addition, when the first game effect (specific music) is executed and the special game is executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol, the game state after the end of the special game is the second game state (high probability and high base). It is confirmed that it will be a state (high probability state). However, the effect executed after the end of the special game is a common effect (non-notification effect that does not notify the game state, non-notification state). As a result, the player who has closely watched the generation process of the special game (the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display that became a big hit) can say that even if the game effect after the special game ends is a non-notification effect. It is possible to recognize that the gaming state is the second gaming state (high probability high base state, high probability state) which is relatively advantageous to the player, and to play the game.

On the other hand, a game that does not know that "the first game effect is executed and becomes a special game" is a definite effect (high probability definite effect) that sets the game state after the end of the special game as the second game state. A person or a player who has not watched the executed game effect well becomes nervous because it becomes difficult to determine that the game state is the second game state during the execution of the non-notification effect after the end of the special game. The game will be played with. In this way, it is possible to impart different playability to each player, prevent tiredness of the game, and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
When it is difficult to determine whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state after the end of the special game, the variation display of the identification information executed after the end of the special game is displayed. When the number of times reaches a specific number of times, the effect of determining the game state is executed.

According to such a game machine, in a state where it is difficult to determine the game state, when the number of times of variable display of the identification information reaches a specific number, an effect capable of determining the game state is executed. As a result, even if it is difficult to discriminate due to the common effect, it is possible to recognize the game state by executing the variable display a specific number of times. Further, this makes it possible for the player to play the game with a sense of security or to play the game with a sense of tension until the variable display of a specific number of times is executed, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, it is possible to execute an effect capable of determining whether the gaming state in the difficult-to-determine state is the first gaming state or the second gaming state. In addition, an effect capable of determining the current gaming state may be executed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2.
The predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball enters, and the first aspect can be changed to a second aspect in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first aspect. Variable starting port and
A ball entry frequency setting means capable of setting a first frequency state and a second frequency state in which the ball entry frequency into the variable starting port is higher than that of the first frequency state.
A probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability or a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result is provided.
As the gaming state, it has a third gaming state.
The first gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second frequency state.
The second gaming state is the high probability and second frequency state.
The third gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first frequency state.
When the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the first gaming state and the number of times of the variation display of the identification information is executed the specified number of times in the first gaming state, the gaming state becomes the third gaming state. Set,
Even after the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second gaming state and the number of times of the variation display of the identification information is executed the specified number of times in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is continued. It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, a ball entry frequency setting means capable of setting a first frequency state and a second frequency state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability are provided. Further, the gaming state has a first gaming state, a second gaming state, and a third gaming state. The first gaming state has a predetermined probability and the second frequency state, and the second gaming state has a high probability and It is a second frequency state, and the third gaming state is a predetermined probability and a first frequency state. Then, when the variable display is executed a specific number of times in the first game state, the third game state is set, and the second game state continues even after the variable display is executed a specific number of times in the second game state.

As a result, in a state where it is difficult to determine the gaming state, if it is the second gaming state (high probability and second frequency state), the second gaming state is continued even after the variable display of a specific number of times is executed. If it is possible and it is in the first gaming state (predetermined probability and second frequency state), it shifts to the third gaming state (predetermined probability and first frequency state) after executing the fluctuation display of a specific number of times. Further, as a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that the state in which it is difficult to determine the game state is the second game state, and enhances the interest of the game.

The predetermined probability and the second frequency state are the "low probability high base state", the high probability and the second frequency state are the "high probability high base state", and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state are the "low probability low base state". , The high probability and the first frequency state is also referred to as a "high probability low base state". Further, the first frequency state is also referred to as a "low base state", and the second frequency state is also referred to as a "high base state". Further, the first gaming state may be the first frequency state, and the second gaming state may be the second frequency state.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3.
As the gaming state, it has a fourth gaming state.
Of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state, the fourth gaming state is regarded as the most advantageous gaming state for the player.
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific result and the special game is executed, after the special game is completed, It is characterized in that it is not set to the fourth gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a first gaming state, a second gaming state, a third gaming state, and a fourth gaming state, and among these gaming states, the fourth gaming state is When the game state is considered to be the most advantageous to the player and the second game effect is executed and the special game is executed, the game state after the end of the special game is not set to the fourth game state. As a result, when the first game effect is executed and the special game is executed, it is confirmed that the state does not shift to the most advantageous fourth game state, but shifts to the relatively advantageous second game state. To do.

As a result, when the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, the disappointment that the fourth game state is not the most advantageous even if it becomes a special game, and the disappointment from the first game state. It gives a sense of security about being in an advantageous second game state and enhances the game's interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4, the fourth gaming state is the high probability and the first frequency state.

According to such a gaming machine, the most advantageous fourth gaming state among the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state is a high probability and first frequency state.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5.
Equipped with a second variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
The second variable entrance is a game ball when the gaming state becomes the fourth gaming state among the first gaming state, the second gaming state, the third gaming state, and the fourth gaming state. It is characterized by a high frequency of ball entry.

According to such a game machine, a second variable entry port is provided, and the fourth game state of the first game state, the second game state, the third game state, and the fourth game state is the second variable input. The game state in which the frequency of entering the ball mouth is the highest. As a result, the fourth gaming state is set to the most advantageous gaming state in these gaming states.

In addition, as the special game, there are a big hit game and a small hit game.
In the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends can be changed from the gaming state before the jackpot game starts.
In the small hit game, the game state after the end of the small hit game is not changed from the game state before the start of the small hit game.
The first variable entry port (variable entry port) is in a state where the ball can enter in the big hit game, and the second variable entry port is in a state where the ball can enter in the small hit game.
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, the second variable ball entry port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port, and the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second starting port is higher than that of the game profit. , The game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second variable entrance is increased.
In the second gaming state with a high probability, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second starting port is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the variable ball entrance, the possibility of the game ball entering the second variable entry port when the small hit game occurs can be determined with a high probability and the second game. The game profit that can be obtained is higher in the high probability and the first gaming state than in the high probability and the second gaming state by making the first gaming state higher than the state. You may.

In addition, it is equipped with a music selection means that can select the music to be executed along with the game production.
As music (game production), it has a first music (specific music, first game production) and a second music (second game production).
When the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific effect symbol (big hit effect symbol) and a special game is executed, depending on the specific effect symbol (just by looking at it), the game state after the end of the special game is the first game state. It is difficult to determine whether it is set to (low probability high base state, low probability state) or second game state (high probability high base state, high probability state).
When the music executed during the special game is the first music, the game state after the end of the special game is the second game state.
When the music executed during the special game is the second music, the game state after the end of the special game may be a first game state or a second game state.

Further, when the first selected song in the special game is the first song, the game state after the end of the special game may be the second game state. That is, when a plurality of songs are executed during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is the second game state only when the first selected song is the first song. It shall be suggested that.

In addition, it is equipped with a music selection means that can select the music to be executed along with the game production.
As music (game production), it has a first music (specific music, first game production) and a second music (second game production).
As a game production, it has a first reach production (type 1 production) and a second reach production (type 2 production).
The first song can be executed in both the first reach production and the second reach production.
It is possible that the special game is more likely to be executed when the first music is executed in the first reach effect than when the first music is executed in the second reach effect.

According to the game machine of the third reference invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that executes a game production that enhances the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game mode setting means that can set a predetermined game mode, and
In the predetermined game mode, the advance notice effect executing means for executing the predetermined advance notice effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
The game mode includes a first game mode and a second game mode in which the effect mode (background image, mode name, and game state) is different from that of the first game mode.
The notice effect includes a first notice effect that can be executed in the first game mode and the second game mode, and a second notice effect that can be executed in the second game mode.
In the second game mode, the second notice effect may be executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the second notice effect may change to the first notice effect.
In the second game mode, the first notice effect is executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and the first notice effect does not change to the second notice effect. ..

According to such a game machine, a game mode setting means capable of setting a first game mode and a second game mode and a notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect are provided, and the first game is provided as a notice effect. It has a first notice effect that can be executed in both the mode and the second game mode, and a second notice effect that can be executed in the second game mode. Then, when the second notice effect is executed in the second game mode, the second notice effect may change to the first notice effect, and when the first notice effect is executed in the second game mode. , The first notice effect does not change to the second notice effect.

As a result, although the second notice effect for the second game mode may change to the first notice effect for common use in the first game mode and the second game mode, the first notice effect for common use is the first. 2 There is no change to the second notice effect for the game mode. Further, this makes it possible to increase the execution opportunity of the first advance notice effect of the common effect, which is widely executed and has many execution opportunities, and to execute the advance notice effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, by changing from the first notice effect, which is relatively frequently executed, to the second notice effect, which is relatively infrequently executed, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the meaning of the notice effect (big hit reliability, etc.). To do.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
Acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and
A storage information display means capable of displaying the storage information corresponding to the acquired information stored by the acquired information storage means is provided.
In the first notice effect, the display mode of the stored information can be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, and the display mode indicates the feasibility of the special game.
In the second notice effect, the display mode of the stored information can be displayed in the third display mode and the fourth display mode, and the display mode indicates the feasibility of the special game. It is characterized by.

According to such a game machine, an acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and a stored information capable of displaying stored information corresponding to the acquired information stored by the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a display means. Then, the first notice effect makes it possible to display the stored information in the first display mode and the second display mode, and the second notice effect makes it possible to display the stored information in the third display mode and the fourth display mode. In addition, the feasibility of the special game is shown by the display mode of the stored information.

As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the stored information in various ways depending on the game mode. Further, the display of the first display mode or the second display mode of the stored information is set as the first notice effect, and the display of the third display mode or the fourth display mode of the stored information is set as the second notice effect, and the transition of these display modes is performed. By directing, the feasibility of special games will be shown and the game will be enhanced. It should be noted that the starting port may be provided and "a predetermined condition is satisfied" based on the ball entering the starting port.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2.
In the second game mode
When the display mode of the stored information is displayed in the third display mode and the stored information in the third display mode changes to the fourth display mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
There are cases where the display mode of the stored information is displayed in the third display mode and the stored information in the third display mode changes to the second display mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
The display mode of the stored information is displayed in the first display mode with the variable display of the identification information, and the stored information of the first display mode is changed to any of the third display mode and the fourth display mode. There is no case to do
The display mode of the stored information is displayed in the second display mode with the variable display of the identification information, and the stored information in the second display mode changes to either the third display mode or the fourth display mode. It is characterized in that there is no case.

According to such a game machine, in the second game mode, the display mode of the stored information changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, and the display mode of the stored information changes from the third display mode to the second display mode. There are cases where the mode changes and cases where the mode changes. That is, there are a case where the display mode for the second game mode is changed and a case where the display mode for the second game mode is changed to a display mode common to the game modes. Further, the first display mode for common use does not change to the third display mode or the fourth display mode for the second game mode, and the second display mode for common use to the third display mode for the second game mode. It does not change to the display mode or the fourth display mode. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the stored information in various ways depending on the game mode.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is described in Reference Invention 4-2 or Reference Invention 4-3.
The stored information display means can display a plurality of the stored information according to the number of the acquired information to be stored.
The first notice effect is a notice effect that changes the display mode of all the displayed stored information.
The second notice effect is a notice effect that changes the display mode of the stored information corresponding to the acquired information indicating the feasibility of the special game.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of stored information can be displayed according to the number of stored information to be acquired. The first notice effect is a notice effect that changes the display mode of all the displayed stored information, and the second notice effect changes the display mode of the target stored information indicating the feasibility of the special game. It is a notice production to let you. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the first notice effect and the second notice effect so that the player can easily recognize them, and easily recognize that the second notice effect has changed to the first notice effect. Become. In addition, this will enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the first notice effect is a notice effect that changes the display mode of all the displayed stored information, and the second notice effect is a memory displayed corresponding to the acquired information indicating the feasibility of the special game. It may be a notice effect that changes only the display mode of the information. That is, the display mode of the stored information irrelevant to the advance notice effect is not changed.

Further, in the first game mode, the display mode of the stored information is displayed in the first display mode along with the variable display of the identification information, and the stored information in the first display mode is changed to the second display mode. May be
In the second game mode, the display mode of the stored information is displayed in the first display mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and the stored information in the first display mode changes to the second display mode. There may be.

Further, the first notice effect that can be executed in any of the first game mode and the second game mode is also referred to as "common notice effect (mode common notice effect)", and can be executed in the second game mode and is the first. The second notice effect that cannot be executed in one game mode is also referred to as "unique notice effect (mode-specific notice effect)". In addition, the advance notice effect may indicate the feasibility of the special game.

Further, the game state has a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and the first game mode is a game mode set in the first game state. The two game modes may be game modes set in the second game state. On the contrary, the first game mode may be a game mode set in the second game state, and the second game mode may be a game mode set in the first game state. Further, the first gaming state and the first gaming state are provided with a ball entry frequency setting means capable of setting a first frequency state and a second frequency state in which the frequency of entering the variable starting port is higher than that of the first frequency state. 2 The gaming state may be a gaming state in which the ball entry frequency (frequency state) is different. Further, a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability or a higher probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result is provided, and the first game state and the second game state are probabilities ( The game states may have different jackpot probabilities). Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be set to a gaming state in which one or both of the ball entry frequency (frequency state) and the probability (big hit probability) are different.

According to the game machine of the reference invention 4, it is possible to provide a game machine that executes a game effect that enhances the interest of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect according to the variable display of the identification information, and
A sound output means capable of outputting a predetermined game sound in association with the game production,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
As the game effect, it has a first specific game effect and a second specific game effect.
The feature is that the magnitude of the sound pressure of the game sound output in connection with the first specific game effect and the magnitude of the sound pressure of the game sound output in association with the second specific game effect are different. It is something to do.

According to such a game machine, a game effect accompanied by a predetermined game sound is executed along with the variable display of the identification information. Further, as the game production, the first specific game production and the second specific game production are provided, and the magnitude of the sound pressure is made different between the game sound of the first specific game production and the game sound of the second specific game production. .. As a result, the player can distinguish the game effect not only by the display mode but also by the magnitude of the sound pressure, increase the variation of the game effect, and provide the game effect with high taste.

Further, as another aspect, in a game effect (specific reach effect, etc.) accompanied by a predetermined game sound, a predetermined amount of sound pressure (first sound pressure) is output, and a sound pressure higher than the predetermined amount of sound pressure is obtained. There may be a case where (second sound pressure) is output. That is, it has a game effect (specific reach effect, etc.) having the same display mode with different sound pressures. Further, even if the game production with a sound pressure (second sound pressure) larger than the predetermined amount of sound pressure has higher jackpot reliability than the game production with a predetermined amount of sound pressure (first sound pressure). Good.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
The sound pressure of the game sound output in association with the first specific game effect is set to be higher than the sound pressure of the game sound output in association with the second specific game effect.
The possibility that the result of the variation display of the identification information executed in association with the first specific game effect will be the specific result is the result of the variation display of the identification information executed in association with the second specific game effect. Is higher than the above-mentioned specific result.

According to such a game machine, the case where the first specific game effect in which the sound pressure of the output game sound is large is executed is higher than the case in which the second specific game effect in which the sound pressure of the game sound is small is executed. However, it is highly likely that the result of the variable display of the identification information will be a specific result. That is, it is assumed that the special game is highly feasible. As a result, the player pays attention to the change in sound pressure in advancing the game, and conventionally, the taste is given and the game is enhanced. In addition, even if you play a game for a long time and lack the ability to concentrate on the game production, it is possible to increase the concentration on the game production and raise the expectation for the occurrence of a special game by changing the sound pressure. Become.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
A specific period in which the game sound can be output with a sound pressure larger than a specific amount, and
A specific period notification unit for notifying that the specific period will be reached is provided.
The specific period notification unit is generated before the specific period is generated during the execution of the variation display of the identification information and the game sound having a sound pressure larger than the specific amount is output due to the occurrence of the specific period. It is characterized in that it notifies that the specific period will occur.

Such a game machine includes a specific period in which a game sound can be output with a sound pressure larger than a specific amount, and a specific period notification unit for notifying that the specific period is reached. Then, when a specific period is generated, the specific period notification unit is notified that the specific period is generated before the game sound having a sound pressure larger than the specific amount is output. As a result, when the period during which the game sound with a large sound pressure can be output starts, the player can know in advance that a large sound pressure can be generated. Further, this can prevent the player from suddenly outputting a game sound having a large sound pressure, which makes the player feel uncomfortable and lowers the game interest. Further, this makes it possible to expect the occurrence of "the first specific game production in which the sound pressure of the output game sound is large", which indicates a relatively high possibility of executing the special game, and enhance the game interest.

Further, it may have a specific period and a non-specific period which is a period other than the specific period, and may not output a game sound having a sound pressure larger than the specific amount in the non-specific period. Further, when the occurrence of the specific period is notified to the specific period notification unit, the player can select whether or not to generate the sound pressure larger than the specific amount by inputting to the input means. If it is selected not to execute the specific period, the specific period is not executed and the game sound with the sound pressure larger than the specific amount is not output. If it is selected to execute a specific period, the specific period is executed and a game sound having a sound pressure larger than the specific amount is output. If neither is selected, a specific period may be executed to generate a sound pressure larger than a specific amount. Further, as another aspect, the game sound may have a first game sound and a second game sound, and may be a game sound having a sound pressure different from that of the first game sound and the second game sound. Further, the sound pressures of the first game sound and the second game sound are the same, but the frequencies may be different.

In addition, a winning / failing determination means that makes a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
An identification information display means that variablely displays the identification information based on the result of the pass / fail determination,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A special game execution means for executing a special game that enables the variable entrance to enter the ball is provided.
When the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result, the identification information may be stopped and displayed in a specific mode to be a gaming machine capable of executing the special game.

According to the game machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to provide a game machine that executes a game production that enhances the interest of the game.

In addition, 2 or more arbitrary inventions of Reference Invention 1 to Reference Invention 5 described above may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Production symbol display area (production symbol display area), 8 Production design, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 26 3rd start port, 30 1st prize opening, 35 2nd size Winning slot, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board ( Sub-control unit), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect hold indicator, 103b fourth effect hold indicator.

Claims (1)

Identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect according to the variable display of the identification information, and
A sound output means capable of outputting a predetermined game sound in association with the game production,
A variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the variable entrance is enabled to enter the ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
A game machine characterized by having a first specific game effect and a second specific game effect as the game effect.

Images